ﻋﺭﺑﻲ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ENGLISH USER GUIDE LG-M710ds Copyright ©2017 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. www.lg.com MFL70221001 (1.
ﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﺭﺑﻲ ﺷﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ .LGﻭﻧﺭﺟﻭ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺁﻣﻧﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ .ﻭﻟﻘﺩ ﺻُﻣﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ. • ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻣﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺣﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ. • ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ :ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ :ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ :ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ 5 ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ 01 02 ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ 23 ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ 24 ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء 12 ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIM 14 QuickButton 26 15 ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ 27 18 ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ 29 ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ 19 QuickMemo+ 30 21 ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ 30
03 ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ 04 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ 55 ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ 86 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ 56 ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ 86 ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ 57 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ 98 ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ 60 ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ 99 ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ 61 ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ 100ﻋﺎﻣﺔ 69 ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ 71 ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ 72 ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ 74 ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ 75 ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ 75 ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ 05 76 ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ 76 ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 77 ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ 108ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ .ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻳّﺩ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻣﺭﺍً ﺧﻁﺭﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ،ﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ .ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻘﻁ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ .
ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻪ • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ .LGﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ LG ﺃﻱ ﺿﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ .ﺍﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻲ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟـ ،LGﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ًﺓ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ.
• ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻭﻟّﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ .ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ .ﻟﺫﺍ ،ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺑﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻳﺟﻑّ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ .ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺷﻌﺭ.
ﺗﺟ ّﻧﺏ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﻊ ،ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ. ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺿﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ .ﻭﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺫﻧﻙ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻭﻝ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ،ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺛﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻣ ﱡﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﺱ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺻﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻁﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑّﺏ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ. • ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗِﺑﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ. ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ .ﻓﻬﻭ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﺗﺳﺑّﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ. ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﺑ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ .
ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ. • ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﻓﺷﺭﻛﺔ LGﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ. • ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ. • ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ.
01 ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ
ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻳﻠﺔ .IP68 ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺛﺑُﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ )ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ IP68ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻲ - IEC 60529ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ]ﺭﻣﺯ [IP؛ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ 15-35 :ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ 86-106ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ 1.5 ،ﻣﺗﺭ ،ﻟﻣﺩﺓ 30ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(. ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ .
ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻘﻬﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ 1.5ﻣﺗﺭ. ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ 30ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ. • • • • • • • • • • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﻙ ﻣﺑﻠﻼً ،ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ. ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩَ ﻳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺗﺎ ﺭﻁﺑ َﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ.
QuickButton ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Outdoor Essentials 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ .QuickButton 2ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ 1 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ .QuickButton • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ،ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ .QuickMemo+ • ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ .
ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ • ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ. ً ﻧﺷﻁﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ. 2 ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺿَ ﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ. 2 3 ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ .ﻭﻟﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ . ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ .ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ: 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ.
ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ. 2ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ ﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ.
QuickMemo+ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ QuickMemo+ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺗﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ ،ﻛﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ. ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ .QuickMemo+ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ. 2ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • • • • • • • • 3 :ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ. :ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء. :ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻪ. :ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. :ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ.
ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ 1 ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ .ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. 2 ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء. • ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ. 3 ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ QuickMemo+ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ. • ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء .ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ.
ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ. ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ. • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ . • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ.
02 ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ
ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. • ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ • ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ • ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ • ﻛﻳﺑﻝ USB • ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ • ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ • ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ LG Electronics؛ ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﺑًﺎ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ .
ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ LEDﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ QuickButton ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )(-/+ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ /SIMﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ microSD ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ/ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ NFC ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ/ﻛﻳﺑﻝ USB ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ 24
• • • • ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ :ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ،ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔﻭﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﻱ .ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ. ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ :ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ،ﻓﻼﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ .ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ. ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ :ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ :ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭ ّﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﺩء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﺩ. • ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ،SIMﻓ ُﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ LGﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ. • ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ. 1 ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ. 2 ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ.
3 ﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻫﺑﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ. 4 ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ. • ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ Nano SIMﻓﻘﻁ. ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ،ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ • ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ٍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺗﻡ ﺻﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭ ّﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻠﻝ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺎﻑ.
ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIM • ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﻓﺈﻥ LGﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .SIM • ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ microSDﺗﺻﻝ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ 2ﺗﻳﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺕ .ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ. • ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ exFATﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﻔﻭﻕ 32 ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ.
4 ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻹﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻹﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ. ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﻬﺎ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ . ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ. ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ.
• ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻼً ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﺑًﺎ .ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ USBﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ .LGﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺷﺣﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ .ﻭﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺣﻧﻪ. • ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ .
• • • • • ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ® Bluetoothﺃﻭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ Wi-Fiﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﻣﺎ. ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ. ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ. ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ،ﻛﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ. ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻭﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ،ﻭﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ،ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ.
ﺿﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ .ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﱢ ﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻣﻐﻧﻁﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ،ﻛﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻙ .ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺏ. • ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ. ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ.
• • • • • • ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ :ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻳّﻧﺔ. ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ :Googleﺗﻣ ّﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ Google ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ. ﻣﺟﻠﺩ :ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ. ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ :ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠّﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ .
ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺕ“ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ GPSﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIM • ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ. ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. • ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ .
ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً. ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ.
ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ﺍﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. • ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ،ﺿ ّﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ.
ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺁﺧﺭ. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ. ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺟﻠ ًﺩﺍ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ. • ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﻟﻭﻧﻪ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ. • ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ. • ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ .
ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻼً ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ؛ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ Knock Codeﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ PINﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻛﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ، ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺃﻧﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ،ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷ ﱠﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ. ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ.
ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ. • ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ .LGﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ. • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻅﻔﺭﻙ. • ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ /ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﻅﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺑﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ.
ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Knock Code ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ Knock Codeﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺗﻪ. ﺃﺩﺧﻝ Knock Codeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ Knock Codeﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ. ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ .ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .
ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ. ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (-ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ Screenshotsﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ. ﻋﺑﺭ Capture+ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ) (. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Capture+ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (+ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ .
ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ Smart keyboardﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ .ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺹ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ. • ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ .QWERTY ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ Smart keyboardﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ .ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻁﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻧﺻًﺎ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ QWERTY ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. 1 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ LGﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ .QWERTY ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ .QWERTY 2 ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ. • ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ QWERTYﻭ QWERTZﻭ .
ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ LGﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ 2 ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ LG ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. • ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ .ﻟﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ،ﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ . • ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ. • ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ. • ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ LGﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ.
Clip Tray ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺹ ،ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑـ Clip Trayﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺻﻘﻪ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ. ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ . 1ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ،ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ .CLIP TRAY 2 ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ Clip Trayﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﺻﻘﻪ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ 20ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺑـ .Clip Tray • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ .ﻭﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻً.
ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ،ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ NASﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ،ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ. ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ DLNAﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ) (DLNAﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ. ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ DLNAﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ.
ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺗﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. 1 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2 ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ: • ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ :ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ .ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ،ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﻋﺔ. • ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ :ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ.
03 ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ
ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ SmartWorldﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ Playﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﺩﻯ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺗﺎﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ. • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ SmartWorldﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ.
ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ. • ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻭﻥ. ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .
ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ،ﻛﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ. ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ: ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ. • ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ. • ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء، ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” “+ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ 0ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﻟﻠﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ. • ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﺭﻓﺽ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ.
ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ. 1 2 3 ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ،ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ. ﻭﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ. • ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ .ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ. ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ .
ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ. • ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ .ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ. 1 2 3 4 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . . ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣًﺎ ﻭﺃﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ. . • ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ. ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ّﺗﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ. 1 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ .
ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺛﻣﻳﻧﺔ. . ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ،ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ. • ﻭﻛﻥ ﺣﺭﻳﺻًﺎ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻁﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ،%5ﻓﺎﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ .
ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ. ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (-ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (+ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ) (-ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ.ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ. ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ. . 2ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ .
ﻻﻗﻁ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ. ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ .GPS ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ. )ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(. ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ. ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ.
ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ. 1 2 3 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ . ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﺣﺭﱢ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ. ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ .
ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ .ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ. AE/AF lock ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻳﺋﺗﻙ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ. • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ، ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ -/+ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ. • ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ/ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ. ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻪ. ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻭﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. • ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ،ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ .ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ،ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ. • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ“.
ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ،ﺗﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ. ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ. ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ .
ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ. 1 . ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ. 2 ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ. • ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. • ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ. • ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻪ. • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ.
ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ 1ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . 2ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ. 3ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. • ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ. ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ. ﻓﺗﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ QSlide. ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ. ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ. ﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ.
ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ. • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ. ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ LG ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ. ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﺋﺔ. ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ. ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ. ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ.
• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء. • ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ .ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﺯﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ .ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ،ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ. • ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ .Hi-Fiﻭﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ Hi-Fiﺭﻣﺯ .
ﻓﺗﺢ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ، ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ. ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ. 1ﺍﻟﻣﺱ 2ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺭﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ. • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ 1ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . 2ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ. 3ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ. • ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ .
ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . 2ﺣﺩﺩ 3ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ. ً ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ،ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ .ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ً ﺣﺩﺛﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ. ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺗﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺗﻪ.
ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ :ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ. 1 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ. • ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ. • ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ. ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ. ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩء. • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ .ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ. • ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ. ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩء ﻟﺑﺩء ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ. 1 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ . • ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ. • ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺙ. 3 ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ. 4 ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ.
LG Health ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ LG Health ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺻﺣﺗﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﻣﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ LG Health ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ LG Healthﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ. 1 2 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ LG .LG Health ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ. ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ LG Health ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺹ LG Healthﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ.
:ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻪ. • :ﺑﺩء ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ • ﻣﺎﺭﺳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ. :ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ • ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ LG Healthﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ. • ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ LG Healthﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺳُﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺻﻪ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ. 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ 2ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ. 3ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ. ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ. • ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ. • ﻣﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ. ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ.
ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ. 1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ 2ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ. 3ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﺿﺎء ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ. 4ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ. ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ. 1 2 3 ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ LG ﻣﻬﺎﻡ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ،ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ. LG Backup ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ.
• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ .ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ،Googleﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ Googleﻭﺍﺳﻣﺎء Googleﻭﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ Googleﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ Googleﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ Playﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Driveﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ *.lbfﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ LG Backupﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ.
ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ Google ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ Googleﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ .Googleﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ Googleﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ،Googleﻓﺄﻧﺷﺊ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﻭﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ،ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ. • ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ.
ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ Play ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ .Playﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ. ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ. YouTube ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .
04 ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ. ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ. ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ .ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • :SIM 1ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻭﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .SIM 1 • :SIM 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻭﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ .
Wi-Fi ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ .Wi-Fi ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ Wi-Fi 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ .Wi-Fi ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. 3 ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ. • ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ .Wi-Fi • ﻭﻳﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ Wi-Fiﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ،ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ. ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ Wi-Fi ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ .
Wi-Fi Direct ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ Wi-Fi Directﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ .ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ .Wi-Fi Direct 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ .Wi-Fi Direct • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ Wi-Fi Directﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. 2 ً ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ. ﺣﺩﺩ • ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ. Wi-Fi ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ • ﻗﺩ ُﺗﺳﺗﻧﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ .
Bluetooth ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ Bluetoothﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ .ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ Bluetoothﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ؛ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ. ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ .Bluetooth ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. • ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺣﺙ. • ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳّﻧﺔ ﻛﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ. 3 4 ً ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ.
ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻬﺎ. ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ 2ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. • ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ :ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ.
ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ NFC ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ .ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ .NFC ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ • ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ NFCﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ NFCﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ .NFC Android Beam ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ .
ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ .LG • ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • :LG X ventureﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ :ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ. • ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ :ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ.
LG AirDrive ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ LGﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ. ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ .USB 1 2 3 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ .LG AirDrive ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ LGﻓﺭﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ LG Bridgeﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ LG AirDriveﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ LG Bridgeﻣﻥ .www.lg.com ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ USB ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ USBﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. 1 2 ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ .USB ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ USBﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ .ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ. • ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ،ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ USBﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ www.lg.comﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ.
ﻧﻘﻁﺔ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. 1 ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2 ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ،Wi-Fiﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻌﺭﻑ ) Wi-Fi (SSIDﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ. 3 4 ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Wi-Fiﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ .Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ.
ﺭﺑﻁ Bluetooth ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ Bluetoothﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. 1 ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. 2 ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ Bluetoothﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻹﻗﺭﺍﻧﻬﻣﺎ. ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺭﺑﻁ Bluetoothﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ .ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ. • ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ: http://www.android.
ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ :ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ. • ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ .ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ،ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ. • ﻣﺷﻐﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ :ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺷﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. VPN ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺁﻣﻧﺔ ،ﻣﺛﻝ .
ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ :ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ. • ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ :ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ. • ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ /SIM1ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ :SIM2ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ .ﻭﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ. • ﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ :ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ.
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ :ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ. • ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ :ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ. • ﺳﻣﺔ :ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. • ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ :ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ. • ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ :ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ. • ﻧﺹ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ :ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﺎﻣ ًﻘﺎ.
ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ :ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ .ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ. • ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ :LGﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ .LG • ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ :Googleﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻼء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ .Googleﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ :ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ. • ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ .ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ. • ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ :ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ :ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ. ّ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ :ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ :ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ. ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ :LEDﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺭ .LED ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ :ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ.
QuickButton ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ .QuickButton • ﺭﺍﺟﻊ QuickButtonﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ. ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ. ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ. ﺍﺳﺣﺏ • :Capture+ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ.
• • • • • • • • • ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ :SIMﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ USIMﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﺭﻣﺯ .(PIN ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ :ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ. ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ :ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ .Play ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ. ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ :ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ، ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺣﺩ ًﺩﺍ. • ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ :ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻛﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ.
ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ؛ ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ. 1 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ: • :LG Backupﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ .ﺍﻧﻅﺭ LG Backupﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ.
05 ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ
ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ LG ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ • ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ LG Bridge ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ LG Bridge LG Bridgeﻫﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ LGﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ.
ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ LG Bridgeﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ 1 2ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ. 3ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ. 4ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ www.lg.comﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ. ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ. 5 ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻲ ﺳﻲ ﺳﻳﻧﻙ ) LG Bridge (PC Syncﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ. • ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ .LG Bridge ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ LGﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ. ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ http://www.lg.
ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ LGﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ )(OTA ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﺑﺭ OTA ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ .USBﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ LGﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ.
ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﺳﺭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ .ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ. ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ. ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ. ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ/ﻓُﻘﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ. ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ. ﺟﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ٍ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻟﺔ. ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻭﻟﺗﻳﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ. ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ. ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ LG ﻓﻘﻁ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻗﻡ. ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ.
ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ/ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟﻣّﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ. ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟﻣّﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ .ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ، ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣَ ﻲ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ.
ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻗﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻧﻙ .ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳُﺭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓُﻘﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣُﺳﺣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ Googleﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ. ﻭﻛﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ ﻫﻭ: • ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓُﻘﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺳُﺭﻕ ﻟﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ GPLﻭ LGPLﻭ MPL ﻭﺗﺭﺍﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ .http://opensource.lge.com ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ،ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ.
ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻥ LG Electronicsﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ LG-M710dsﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ .2014/53/EUﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ http://www.lg.
ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ .1ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ. .2ﺳﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ. .3ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻡ ،ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ.
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺗﺷﮑﺭﻳﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ LGﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ .ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ،ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. • ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ LGﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ،ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ.
ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ :ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ :ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻧﮑﺗﻪ :ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ.
ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ 5 ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ 01 02 ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 12 ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ 23 ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ 14 ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ 24 ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ 15 ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ 26 ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ 18 ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ 27 ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ 19 QuickMemo+ 30 ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ 21 ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ 31 ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ 21 QSlide 32 ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑ
03 ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ 04 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ 57 ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ 90 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ 58 ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ 90 ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ 59 ﺗﻠﻔﻥ 102ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ 63 ﭘﻳﺎﻡ 103ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ 64 ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ 104ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ 72 ﮔﺎﻟﺭی 75 ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ 76 ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ 77 ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ 78 ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ 79 ﺳﺎﻋﺕ 05 80 ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ 80 ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ 81 ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ 113 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ LG 81 ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ 113 LG Bridge
ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻋﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺿﺭﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻧﻘﺽ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺁﻣﺩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ،ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﻠﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻣﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻋﻠﺕ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ .
ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ • ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ LGﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ،ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ LG .ﻫﻳﭼﮕﻭﻧﻪ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺑﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﻳﺩﺍً ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﻧﺳﻳﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﭘﺯﺷﮏ ﻣﺷﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ 15ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭی ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﻩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﮔﻭﺵ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺗﯽ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ. ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺗﻧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺭﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻭﭼﮑﯽ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻳﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ ،ﻫﺭﮔﺯ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﺑﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ. ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ • ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺍﻳﻣﻥﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ • ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ LG .ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ. • ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ.
01 ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ
ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻅﺕ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ،IP68ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺗﺳﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺕ )ﺑﺭ ﻁﺑﻕ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩیﻫﺎی ﻁﺑﻘﻪﺑﻧﺩی IP68ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻳﻥﺍﻟﻣﻠﻠﯽ IEC 60529ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﭘﻭﺷﺵﻫﺎ ]ﮐﺩ [IP؛ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺗﺳﺕ 35-15 :ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽﮔﺭﺍﺩ، 106-86ﮐﻳﻠﻭﭘﺎﺳﮑﺎﻝ 1.5 ،ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ 30ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ( .
ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 1.5ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 30ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • • • • • • • • • • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ ،ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ،ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ ،ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﻭ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩﻧﺩ ،ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ 1ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. 2ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ 1 2ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻳﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ، ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ .QuickMemo+ • ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ،ﻳﮏ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﻳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. 2 3 ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ،ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ. 1 ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 2ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ. ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍکﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ.
QuickMemo+ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ QuickMemo+ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﺧﻼﻗﺎﻧﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ QuickMemo+ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. 1ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 2ﺭﻭی • • • • • • • • 3 :ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. :ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ 1 ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. 2 ﺑﻪ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ. 3 ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻣﺟﺯﺍ ،ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ، ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ.
02 ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮔﻧﺟﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ • ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ • ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ • ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USB • ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ • ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ • ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ LG Electronicsﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی/ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ LEDﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ )(-/+ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ/ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﺛﺭﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ microSD /ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻘﺏ ﻓﻠﺵ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ NFC ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ/ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USB ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 24
• • • • ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی/ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی :ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ،ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ،ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﻧﻭﺭ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ :ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭﻣﺣﻳﻁ ،ﺷﺩﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ. ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ،ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ.
• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺯﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺷﮑﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﺩ .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩی ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺵ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﻧﻭک ﺗﻳﺯ ﺳﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ. • ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺕ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ،ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ LGﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. 1 ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
2 ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. 3 ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻁﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ.
4 ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻧﻭ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ،ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ .ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ microSDﺑﺎ ﻅﺭﻓﻳﺕ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ 2ﺗﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻥ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 32ﮔﻳﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ،ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ exFATﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ .
4 ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺯﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﮐﻧﺩ. ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ.
ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ،ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺵﺳﻭﺯی ،ﺷﻭک ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ،ﺻﺩﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USBﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ. • ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USBﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻟپ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺷﻧﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭼﻧﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺣﺎﻭی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ،ﻋﮑﺱ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﻣﺛﻼً ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺱ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ،ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﺭﺑﺎﻳﯽ ،ﻓﻠﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻘﺻﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• • • • • • ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ :ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ :ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی :Googleﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﺎﺭی، ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ Googleﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﭘﻭﺷﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ :ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻝ ﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ .
ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭی ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ،ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ، ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. • ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺩ. ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ،ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ،ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻼﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺎﺧﻭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪﺍی ،Knock Codeﺍﻟﮕﻭ ،ﮐﺩ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ،ﻗﻔﻝ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ. • ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺷﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ LGﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ. • ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ Knock Code ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ 1ﺭﻭی Knock Codeﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. 2 ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ Knock Codeﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 3 Knock Codeﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ Knock Codeﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ Knock Codeﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ،ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ Knock Code ،ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ،ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ. • ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺷﺩ ،ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﻧﻳﺳﺗﻧﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻧﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭ ،ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. • ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ.
• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ) ،(+ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ +ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ Smartﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ،ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ .ﻫﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ،ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﺗﺭ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ. ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. • ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی QWERTY ،QWERTZﻭ AZERTYﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ. ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ LG 1ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺭ ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ LGﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ .
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻓﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ ،ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺻﺩﺍ ،ﺭﻭی ﺻﺩﺍ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ • ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ.
ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﻓﺿﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 2 ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻧﯽ ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ 20ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ NAS ،ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ DLNAﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ) (DLNAﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ.
• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ. • ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ. 1 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ.
03 ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ
ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ. • ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ SmartWorldﻭ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ Playﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﭘﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ،ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﺛﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻳﺭ. ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ 1ﺭﻭی 2ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ،ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. • ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ.
ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ، • ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ، ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ،ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ.
ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ. • ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ :ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ :ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭ :ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ :ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ :ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ. • :Bluetoothﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺕ.
ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ .ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ،ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ،ﻳﮏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ،ﺭﻭی • ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ. ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﻫﻣﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 4 ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﻳﮏ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ،ﺭﻭی • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﺩﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺭﻭی • ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ،ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻳﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻧﻳﻔﺗﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 5%ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺭﻕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ.
• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ) ،(-ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭ ﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی 1ﺭﻭی ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 2ﺭﻭی • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی، ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻣﺣﻝ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی GPSﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ. ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ SDﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ(. ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭘﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺭﻭی • ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺕ ﭘﻳﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ،ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. AE/AF lock ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ،ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ،ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ.
ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ،ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﺍﻥ -/+ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. • ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ،ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ. ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ.
ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺩﻫﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﺩ. • ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺽ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ،ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﻔﻳﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺭﺩﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺳﺗﺩ ،ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺭﻭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺑﺎ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﺗﺎﻥ ،ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻳﺩ ،ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ،ﺭﻭی ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺁﻳﺩ. ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺭﻭی • ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ. 2 ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩی ،ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ،ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ.
ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 1ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺭﻭی 2ﺍﺯ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﻭﻳﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻧﻭﺷﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﮔﺯﻳﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ. ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺣﺫﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ،ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ 7ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ. ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ • ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ،ﺭﻭی ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ،ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ.
ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی LG ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ. ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ. ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ / ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ. ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ. ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ.
ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ 1ﺭﻭی 2ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﭘﺳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 1ﺭﻭی 2ﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 4 ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ Googleﻧﻳﺯ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ .ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ Googleﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺑﻼً ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ،ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ. ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻬﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭ ﮔﻳﺭی ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ،ﺭﻭی ﺍﺯﺳﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ،ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻡ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺭﻭی ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﻭی • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ،ﺭﻭی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡﺳﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ،ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 3 ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
LG Health ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ LG Health ﺑﺎ ﭘﻳﮕﻳﺭی ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ LG Health ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ LG Health ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺭﻭی LG Health LGﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﮑﻣﻳﻝ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ،ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
:ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • :ﭘﻳﮕﻳﺭی ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﺳﻳﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. :ﺍﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻟﺭی ﻭ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭ • ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ،ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ LG Healthﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ LG Healthﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﺷﮕﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی ،ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی 2ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 3ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ،ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ. • ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ،ﺭﻭی ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ 2ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﺿﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 4 ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 3 ﺭﻭی LG ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ .ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ،Googleﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ،Googleﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ،Googleﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ،Google ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ Googleﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﺎ Playﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ Driveﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. • ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺳﻭﻧﺩ *.ibfﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ LGﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ.
ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی Google ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی Googleﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ Googleﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ،ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ.
ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ Play ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ Play ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ Playﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭگ ﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
04 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ • ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ،ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﻁﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺑﺭﮔﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
Wi-Fi ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ Wi-Fiﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ Wi-Fi 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ Wi-Fiﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 2 • ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی Wi-Fiﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. 3 ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ Wi-Fiﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی Wi-Fiﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ،ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ .
Wi-Fi Direct ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ Wi-Fi Direct ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Wi-Fi Directﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fiﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ Wi-Fi Directﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. 2 ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
Bluetooth ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ Bluetoothﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ Bluetoothﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ 1 ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ Bluetoothﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺳﺎﺯی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ 1 ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ 2ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ :ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ NFC ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ. 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 2 ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺭﻭی • ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ NFCﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ NFCﺿﺭﺑﻪ • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺁﻧﺗﻥ NFCﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .
ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺑﻠﺕ ﻫﺎی LGﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 2 ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • :LG X ventureﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. • ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ :ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ :ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ.
LG AirDrive ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ LGﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ USBﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ. 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. 2 ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ LGﺗﮑﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ LG Bridgeﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ LG AirDriveﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ LG Bridgeﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ www.lg.comﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3 ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ USB ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ USBﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USBﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ USBﺿﺭﺑﻪ • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ.
ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ Wi-Fi ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ Wi-Fiﺿﺭﺑﻪ 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 2 ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ Wi-Fiﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ) (SSIDﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3 Wi-Fiﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ Wi-Fi ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ. 2 Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ • ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .
ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ،ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ،ﻫﻣﭼﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3 ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ VPNﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ VPN 1 2 ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی VPNﺭﻭی VPNﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭی VPNﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ.
• • • • LEDﺍﻋﻼﻥ :ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ LEDﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺳﻳﻡ 1ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ /ﺳﻳﻡ 2ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ :ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ :ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩﮔﻳﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﻳﺩ ،ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺻﺩﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ.
• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ :ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ،ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﺗﺣﺭک :ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ .ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﮐﺎﻟﻳﺑﺭﺍﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ :ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﺩ. • ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺣﯽ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ .
ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ :ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ :ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ. • ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﮐﻡ :ﻣﺣﻝ ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﮐﻡ ﺍﻧﺭژی ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻡ ::ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻥ ﭘﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ :ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ :ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻭﭼﮏﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ :ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ،ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ :ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺑﺯﺭگ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ :ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
• • • • • • • • ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻛﻠﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﻛﻲ :ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ :ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ :ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ Google ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ Googleﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی Googleﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ Googleﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ 1 2ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ • • • • • • • • • • • • • ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ :ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻳﺎ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ: • ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ :ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ .
ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ. 1 2 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ.
• ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی :ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ .ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ،ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ،ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻗﯽ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ.
05 ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ
ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ LG ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ • ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﻳﺵﻓﺭﺽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ. ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ LG Bridge ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ LG Bridge LG Bridgeﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ،ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ،ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ LGﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .
ﻧﺻﺏ LG Bridgeﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ 1ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ www.lg.comﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ. 2ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 3ﺭﻭی ) Supportﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ( ) Software & Firmwareﻧﺭﻡﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺎﻥﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ( ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 4 ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻳﺎ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. 5 ﺑﻪ ) PC Syncﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ( ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. • ﺑﻪ ) Detailsﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ( ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺻﺏ LG Bridge ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ.
ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ LG Mobileﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )(OTA ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ OTAﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ USBﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ .ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ LGﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻥ.
ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ .ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ، ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺧﻁﺎی ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﻳﭻ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ.
ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻭﻟﺗﺎژ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ LG ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ.
ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺭﻡﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ/ ﺳﺧﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ،ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻧﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺭﺩﻧﺩ ،ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ .
ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩ ،ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ .ﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺩﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﺵ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩ ،ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ Googleﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ.
ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﺩ GPL ،LGPL ،MPLﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ،ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻣﺎی http://opensource.lge.comﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺭ ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ،ﺗﻣﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ،ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ. ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﺱ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻭﺡ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻅﻳﺭ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﺩﻳﺎ ،ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ opensource@lge.comﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻔﺭﺳﺗﻳﺩ.
ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﺑﺩﻳﻧﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ LG Electronics ،ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ LG-M710ds ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ 2014/53/EUﺳﺎﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ .ﻳﮏ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ http://www.lg.com/global/declarationﺑﻳﺎﺑﻳﺩ.
ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ .1ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮏ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎی ﺷﻬﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﻟﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ. .2ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ. .3ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ،ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﺷﻬﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ ،ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ.
ENGLISH About this user guide Thank you for choosing this LG product. Please carefully read this user guide before using the device for the first time to ensure safe and proper use. • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touchscreen keyboard. • Descriptions are based on the device default settings.
Instructional notices WARNING: Situations that could cause injury to the user and third parties. CAUTION: Situations that may cause minor injury or damage to the device. NOTE: Notices or additional information.
Table of contents 5 Guidelines for safe and efficient use 01 02 Custom-designed Features Basic Functions 13 15 16 19 20 22 23 Notes on Water Resistant Properties QuickButton Fingerprint recognition quick share QuickMemo+ Multi-tasking feature QSlide 25 26 28 29 32 33 34 36 40 46 49 50 51 57 58 Product components and accessories Parts overview Turning the power on or off Installing the SIM card Inserting the memory card Removing the memory card Charging the battery Touch screen Home screen Screen lo
03 04 Useful Apps Settings 60 61 62 66 67 76 79 80 81 82 83 84 84 85 85 85 87 89 89 90 90 91 94 94 106 107 109 Installing and uninstalling apps Uninstalled apps Phone Messaging Camera Gallery Music E-mail Calendar Calculator Clock Downloads File Manager Voice Recorder FM Radio LG Health Contacts Tasks LG Backup RemoteCall Service Chrome Google apps Table of contents Settings Networks Sound & notification Display General 05 Appendix 118 118 119 121 124 125 LG Language Settings LG Bridge Phone softw
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Should a fault occur, a software tool is built into your device that will gather a fault log. This tool gathers only data specific to the fault, such as signal strength, cell ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to help determine the cause of the fault.
Product care and maintenance • Use only in-box accessories which are authorised by LG. LG does not guarantee any damage or failure which is caused by third party accessories. • Some contents and illustrations may differ from your device without prior notice. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the device. • Do not expose the device to liquid or moisture. • Use accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. • Do not use, touch or attempt to remove or fix broken, chipped or cracked glass. Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered under the warranty. • Your device is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation.
Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of devices in the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held device while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment.
Glass Parts Some parts of your device are made of glass. This glass could break if your device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider. Blasting area Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions and follow any regulations or rules. Potentially explosive atmospheres • Do not use your device at a refueling point.
Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.
Securing personal information • Make sure to protect your personal information to prevent data leakage or misuse of sensitive information. • Always back up important data while using the device. LG is not responsible for any data loss. • Make sure to back up all data and reset the device when disposing of the device to prevent any misuse of sensitive information. • Read the permission screen carefully while downloading applications.
01 Custom-designed Features
Notes on Water Resistant Properties This product is water and dust resistant in compliance with the Ingress Protection rating IP68. Your product has undergone testing in a controlled environment and is proven to be water and dust resistant in certain circumstances (meets the requirements of classification IP68 as described by the international standard IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection provided by Enclosures [IP Code]; test conditions: 15-35 ºC, 86-106kPa, 1.5 meter, for 30 minutes).
Do not immerse your product in water deeper than approximately 1.5 meters. Do not immerse your product in water for longer than 30 minutes. • If your product becomes wet be sure to wipe the microphone, speaker, and stereo jack with a dry cloth before use. • Should your product or your hands become wet, dry them before handling the product. • Do not use the product in places where it may be sprayed with high pressure water (e.g.
QuickButton You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off. Outdoor Essentials 1 Press once on the QuickButton. 2 Select your desired tool. Globe Mode 1 Double press the QuickButton. 2 Turn Glove mode on or off. • If you enable the Glove mode feature, you can use the touch screen while wearing gloves. • Make sure that Glove Mode is turned off for normal operation when gloves are not used. Settings 1 Press and hold the QuickButton. 2 Select your desired setting.
Fingerprint recognition Fingerprint recognition overview You must register your fingerprint on your device first before using the fingerprint recognition function. You can use the fingerprint recognition function in the following cases: • To unlock the screen. • To view the locked content in the Gallery or QuickMemo+. • Confirm a purchase by signing in to an app or identifying yourself with your fingerprint. • Your fingerprint can be used by the device for user identification.
• The device may generate static electricity if the surrounding air is dry. If the surrounding air is dry, avoid scanning fingerprints, or touch a metallic object such as coin or key before scanning fingerprints to remove static electricity. Registering fingerprints You can register and save your fingerprint on the device to use fingerprint identification. 1 Press Settings General Fingerprints & security Fingerprints. • A lock screen must be set in order to be able to use this feature.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions. • Repeat scanning the fingerprint by moving your finger little by little until the fingerprint registers. 4 When the fingerprint registration is done, tap OK. • Tap ADD MORE to register another fingerprint. If you register only one fingerprint and the corresponding finger is not in a good condition, the fingerprint recognition may not work well. As the preventive measure against this kind of situation, register multiple fingerprints.
quick share You can share a photo or video to the app you want immediately after taking it. , then take a photo or record a video. 1 Press 2 Tap the app icon that appears on the screen to share it using that app. You can also swipe the icon towards the opposite direction to see what other apps you can use to share your photos and videos. quick share icon • The app displayed by the quick share icon may vary, depending on the type and frequency of access to the apps installed on the device.
QuickMemo+ QuickMemo+ overview You can make creative notes by using a variety of options on this advanced notepad feature, such as image management and screenshots, which are not supported by the conventional notepad. Creating a note QuickMemo+. 1 Press 2 Tap to create a note. • • • • • • • • : Save a note. : Undo the last action. : Redo the last action you undid. : Enter a note by using the keypad. : Write notes by hand. : Erase handwritten notes.
Writing notes on a screenshot 1 While viewing the screen you want to capture, drag the status bar downwards and then tap . • The screenshot appears as the notepad background theme. Memo tools appear at the top of the screen. 2 Take notes as desired. • Write notes by hand on the photo. 3 Tap and save the notes to the location you want. • Saved notes can be viewed in either QuickMemo+ or Gallery. • To save notes in the same location all the time, select the Use as default app checkbox and select an app.
Multi-tasking feature Multi window You can use two apps at the same time by separating the screen into the multiple windows. from the Home touch buttons, While using an app, press and hold then select an app from the recently used apps list. • You can use two apps displayed on the main screen at the same time. . • To stop the Multi window feature, press • You can use this feature in an app that supports the Multi window feature.
QSlide You can start apps by using QSlide to use them while other apps are running. For example, use the calendar when a video is playing. QSlide. When an app is running, tap • This feature may not be supported by some apps. • • • • : Turn off the QSlide mode to switch to full-screen mode. : Adjust the opacity of the QSlide window. If the QSlide window is transparent, it will not respond to touch inputs. : Close the QSlide window. : Adjust the size of the QSlide window.
02 Basic Functions
Product components and accessories The following items are included with your device. • Device • Fast charger • Ejection pin • USB cable • Quick Start Guide • Stereo headset • The items described above may be optional. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the area and service provider. • Always use genuine LG Electronics accessories. Using accessories made by other manufacturers may affect your device's call performance or cause malfunctions.
Parts overview Proximity/Ambient light sensor Earpiece Front camera lens Notification LED QuickButton Volume keys (+/-) Power/Lock key Touch screen SIM/microSD card tray Fingerprint sensor/Home key Stereo headset jack Microphone Flash Rear camera lens NFC area Speaker Charger/USB cable port Basic Functions 26
• Proximity/Ambient light sensor - Proximity sensor: During a call, the proximity sensor turns off the screen and disables touch functionality when the device is in close proximity to the human body. It turns the screen back on and enables touch functionality when the device is outside a specific range. - Ambient light sensor: The ambient light sensor analyses the ambient light intensity when the auto-brightness control mode is turned on.
• Screen-protective film or accessories may interfere with the proximity sensor. • If your device is wet or is being used in a humid place, the touch screen or buttons may not function properly. • Your device has a dual-layer screen system. The top layer is a protection screen and the bottom layer is a fixed screen. The protection screen must always be in place to help protect the fixed screen layer from shatter damage. The protection screen comes pre-installed on your device.
Installing the SIM card Insert the SIM card provided by the device service provider to start using your device. • Be careful with the ejection pin since it has a sharp edge. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a LG Service Center to remove the memory card. • In order for the water-resistant and dust-resistant features to work effectively, the card tray must be inserted correctly.
2 Pull out the card tray. 3 Put the SIM card on the card tray with the gold-colored contacts facing downwards.
4 Insert the card tray back into the slot. • This device supports only Nano SIM cards. • For problem-free performance, it is recommended to use the phone with the correct type of SIM card. Always use a factory-made SIM card supplied by your service provider. • If you insert the card tray into your device while the card tray is wet, your device may be damaged. Always make sure the card tray is dry. Precautions when using the SIM card • Do not lose your SIM card.
Inserting the memory card The device supports up to a 2 TB microSD card. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • It is recommended to use exFAT file system when using external memory more than 32GB. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. If you use an incompatible card, it may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. 1 Insert the ejection pin into the hole on the card tray.
4 Insert the card tray back into the slot. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. If you use an incompatible card, it may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. Removing the memory card Unmount the memory card before removing it for safety. Settings General Storage . 1 Press 2 Insert the ejection pin into the hole on the card tray. 3 Pull out the card tray and remove the memory card.
Charging the battery Before using the device, fully charge the battery. Connect one end of the charging cable to the charger, insert the other end of the cable into the cable port, and then plug the charger into a power socket. Charging cable terminal • Do not charge while the device or charging cable is wet or contains moisture. This can cause fire, electric shock, injury or damage to device. • Make sure to use the USB cable provided with your device.
• Remove the charger from the power socket after the device is fully charged. This prevents unnecessary power consumption. • A charging adapter that supports fast charging is included with the product. • The fast charging feature may not work if a fast charging adapter other than the genuine adapter provided with the product is used. • Another way to charge the battery is by connecting a USB cable between the device and a desktop or laptop computer.
Touch screen You can familiarise yourself with how to control your device by using touch screen gestures. Tapping Lightly tap with your fingertip to select or run an app or option. Touching and holding Touch and hold for several seconds to display a menu with available options.
Double-tapping Tap twice quickly to zoom in or out on a web page or map. Dragging Touch and hold an item, such as an app or widget, then move your finger to another location in a controlled motion. You can use this gesture to move an item.
Swiping Tap the screen with your finger and move it quickly without pausing. You can use this gesture to scroll through a list, a web page, photos, screens, and more. Pinching and spreading Pinch two fingers to zoom out such as on a photo or map. To zoom in, spread your fingers apart. • Do not expose the touch screen to excessive physical shock. You might damage the touch sensor.
• A touch screen failure may occur if you use the device near a magnetic, metallic or conductive material. • If you use the device under bright lights, such as direct sunlight, the screen may not be visible, depending on your position. Use the device in a shady location or a location with an ambient light that is not too bright and bright enough to read books. • Do not press the screen with excessive force. • Gently tap with your fingertip on the option you want.
Home screen Home screen overview The Home screen is the starting point for accessing various functions and on any screen to directly go to the apps on your device. Press Home screen. You can manage all apps and widgets on the Home screen. Swipe the screen left or right to view all installed apps at a glance. Home screen layout You can view all apps and organise widgets and folders on the Home screen.
• Status bar: View status icons, the time and the battery level. • Weather widget: View the information of weather and time for a specific area. • Google search widget: Perform a Google search by inputting spoken or written keywords. • Folder: Create folders to group apps by your preferences. • Page icon: Display the total number of Home screen canvases. Tap the desired page icon to go to the page you selected. The icon reflecting the current canvas will be highlighted.
Hotspot is on No SIM card • Some of these icons may appear differently or may not appear at all, depending on the device's status. Refer to the icons according to the actual environment in which you are using the device. • Displayed icons may vary, depending on the area or service provider. Notifications panel You can open the notifications panel by dragging the status bar downward on the main screen. • To open the quick access icons list, drag the notifications panel downwards or tap .
Switching the screen orientation You can set the screen orientation to automatically switch according to the device's physical orientation. On the notification panel, tap Rotation from the quick access icon list. Settings Display and activate AutoYou can also press rotate screen. Editing the Home screen On the Home screen, touch and hold on an empty space, then select the desired action from below. • To rearrange the Home screen canvases, touch and hold on a canvas, then drag it to another location.
Viewing the background theme You can view only the background image by hiding the apps and widgets on the Home screen. Spread two fingers apart on the Home screen. • To return to the original screen, which displays apps and widgets, pinch . your fingers on the Home screen or press Moving apps on the Home screen On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it to another location.
Using folders from the Home screen Creating folders On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it over another app. • A new folder is created and the apps are added to the folder. Editing folders On the Home screen, tap a folder and do one of the following actions. • To edit the folder name and colour, tap the folder name. • To add apps, touch and hold an app, then drag it over the folder and release it. • To remove an app from the folder, touch and hold the app and drag it to outside the folder.
Screen lock Screen lock overview Your device's screen turns off and locks itself if you press the Power/Lock key. This also happens after the device is left idle for a specified period of time. If you press the Power/Lock key when a screen lock is not set, the Home screen appears immediately. To ensure security and prevent unwanted access to your device, set a screen lock. • Screen lock prevents unnecessary touch input on the device screen and reduces battery consumption.
Secure start-up settings When you select Knock Code, Pattern, PIN or Password as a screen lock method, you can configure your device to be locked whenever turning on the device in order to secure your data. • You cannot use all functions, except for emergency calls until you unlock the device. • If you forget your decryption password, you cannot restore encrypted data and personal information. Lock screen settings You can customise the following lock screen settings. Settings Display Lock screen.
• Available setting items may vary, depending on the selected screen lock method. KnockON You can turn the screen on or off by double-tapping the screen. • This option is available only on the Home screen provided by LG. It may not function properly on a custom launcher or on the Home screen installed by the user. • When tapping the screen, use your fingertip. Do not use a fingernail.
Creating a Knock Code Settings Display 1 Press Lock screen Select screen lock Knock Code. 2 Tap the squares in a pattern of your choice to create a Knock Code and tap NEXT. 3 Input the created Knock Code again for verification, then tap CONFIRM. Unlocking the screen with a Knock Code Unlock the screen by inputting the Knock Code you have created. Input your Knock Code on the touch screen when the screen is turned off. • It is also possible to enter a Knock Code when the lock screen is turned on.
• To encrypt the memory card, make sure that a screen lock is set using a PIN or password. • Once memory card encryption starts, some functions are not available. • If the device is turned off while encryption is underway, the encryption process will fail, and some data may be damaged. Therefore, be sure to check if the battery level is sufficient before starting encryption. • Encrypted files are accessible only from the device where the files were encrypted.
Entering text Using the Smart keyboard You can use the Smart keyboard to enter and edit text. With the Smart keyboard, you can view text as you type without bothering to alternate between the screen and a conventional keyboard. This allows you to easily find and correct errors when typing. Moving the cursor With the Smart keyboard, you can move the cursor to the exact position you want. When typing text, touch and hold on the space bar and then drag left or right.
Suggesting words Smart keyboard automatically analyses your usage patterns to suggest frequently used words as you type. The longer you use your device, the more precise the suggestions are. Enter text, then tap a suggested word or gently drag the left or right side of the keyboard bar upwards. • The selected word is automatically entered. You do not need to manually type every letter of the word. Changing the QWERTY keyboard layout You can add, delete or rearrange keys on the bottom row of the keyboard.
• This option is available on the QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY keyboards. • This function may not be supported for some languages. Customising the keyboard height You can customise the keyboard height to maximise hand comfort when typing. 1 Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height. 2 Adjust the keyboard height.
Selecting a landscape keyboard mode You can select a landscape keyboard mode from several choices. 1 Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard type in landscape. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Keyboard type in landscape. 2 Select a keyboard mode. Splitting the keyboard You can split the keyboard in half and place each piece on either side of the screen when the screen is in landscape mode.
One-handed operation mode You can move the keyboard to one side of the screen so that you can use the keyboard with one hand. 1 Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout One-handed operation. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout One-handed operation. 2 Press the arrow displayed next to the keyboard to move the keyboard in the direction you want. Entering text by using voice On the keyboard, touch and hold and then select .
Copy and Paste You can cut or copy text from an app, and then paste the text into the same app. Or, you can run other apps and paste the text into them. 1 Touch and hold around the text you want to copy or cut. 2 Drag / to specify the area to copy or cut. 3 Select either CUT or COPY. • Cut or copied text is automatically added to the clipboard. 4 Touch and hold the text input window, then select PASTE. • If there is no item that has been copied or cut, the PASTE option will not appear.
Content sharing Playing content from another device You can play photos, videos or songs saved on your device from a TV. 1 Connect the TV and your device to the same Wi-Fi network. 2 While viewing the items from the Gallery or Music app, tap Play on other device. 3 Select the TV you want to connect to. • For use with Chromecast, Google Play services should be up to date.
Sending or receiving files You can share files between your device and another LG device, or a tablet or computer. Sending files From the Gallery, File Manager or Music app, tap select a device on the file sharing list. Share or , then Receiving files Drag the status bar downward and tap , then tap File sharing. If your device does not support the file sharing feature, press Settings Networks Share & connect File sharing SmartShare .
03 Useful Apps
Installing and uninstalling apps Installing apps Access an app store to search and download apps. • You can use SmartWorld, Play Store or the app store provided by your service provider. • Some app stores may require you to create an account and sign in. • Some apps may charge fees. • If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage, depending on your pricing plan. • SmartWorld may not be supported depending on the area or service provider.
Uninstalling by using the settings menu Press Uninstall. Settings General Apps, select an app, then tap Uninstalling apps from the app store To uninstall an app, access the app store from which you download the app and uninstall it. • Some apps cannot be uninstalled by users. Uninstalled apps You can view the uninstalled apps on the Home screen. You can also reinstall apps which were uninstalled within 24 hours from now. Uninstalled apps.
Phone Voice call Make a phone call by using one of the available methods, such as manually entering a phone number and making a call from the contact list or the list of recent calls. Making a call from the keypad Dial. 1 Press 2 Make a call by using a method of your choice: • Enter a phone number and tap . • Touch and hold a speed dial number. • Search for a contact by tapping the initial letter of a contact name in the contact list, and then tap .
Answering a call To answer a call, drag to the outside of the circle on the incoming call screen. • When the stereo headset is connected, you can make calls by using the call/end button on the headset. • To end a call simply by pressing the Power/Lock key, press Settings Networks Call Common Answer and end calls, then turn on End call with the Power key. Rejecting a call To reject an incoming call, drag across the incoming call screen.
Functions accessible during a call During a call, you can access a variety of functions by tapping the onscreen buttons: • Contacts: View the contact list during a call. • End: End a call. • Dialpad: Display or hide the dial pad. • Speaker: Turn on the speakerphone function. • Mute: Mute your voice so that your voice cannot be heard by the other party. • Bluetooth: Switch the call to a Bluetooth device that is paired and connected. • : Access additional call options.
Viewing call records To view recent call records, press Call logs. Then, you can use the following functions: • To view detailed call records, select a contact. To make a call to the selected contact, tap . Delete. • To delete call records, tap • The displayed call duration may differ from the call charge. Consult with your service provider for more information. Configuring call options You can configure various call options. Dial or Call logs.
Messaging Sending a message You can create and send messages to your contacts using the Messaging app. • Sending messages abroad may incur additional charges. Consult with your service provider for more information. . 1 Press 2 Tap . 3 Specify a recipient and create a message. . • To attach files, tap • To access optional menu items, tap . 4 Tap Send to send the message. Reading a message You can view exchanged messages organised by contact. . 1 Press 2 Select a thread from the thread list.
Camera Starting the camera You can take a photo or record a video to cherish all of your memorable moments. . Press • Before taking a photo or recording a video, wipe the camera lens with a soft cloth. • Be careful not to stain the camera lens with your fingers or other foreign substance. • If the battery level is lower than 5%, charge the battery before using the camera. • Images included in this user guide may be different from the actual device.
Taking a photo 1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on. 2 Tap to take a photo. • You can also press the Volume Down (-) or Volume Up (+) key to take a photo. • When the screen is turned off or locked, start the camera by pressing the Volume Down (-) key twice. To activate this function, press Settings General and turn on Shorcut keys. Recording a video 1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on. 2 Tap . • To take a photo while recording a video, tap . • To pause the video recording, tap .
HDR Obtain photos in vivid colours, and get compensated effects even when they are taken against the light. These functions are provided by the high dynamic range (HDR) technology equipped in the camera of the device. Timer Set the timer to automatically take photos after a specified period of time. Cheese shutter Take photos with voice commands. Steady recording Minimise motion blur while recording a video. Tag locations Save the image with GPS location data.
Various camera modes Panorama You can create a panoramic photo by moving the camera in one direction to photograph and stitch continuous shots of a wide view. . 1 In the AUTO mode, tap MODE Tap and then slowly move the camera in one direction. 2 • Move the device by following the direction of the arrow in the guideline. 3 Tap to stop capturing the panoramic.
Other useful features in the Camera app Burst shot You can take continuous shots of photos to create moving pictures. On the camera screen, touch and hold . • Continuous shots are taken at a fast speed while is held down. • Up to thirty (30) continuous photos can be taken. Simple view Tap Simple view to hide menus on the camera screen. Tap display them. to AE/AF lock You can fix the current exposure level and focus position by touching and holding the screen on the camera screen.
Switching between cameras You can switch between the front and rear cameras to suit your environment. On the camera screen, tap or drag the screen in any direction to switch between the front and rear cameras. • Use the front camera to take selfies. See Selfie shot for details. Zoom in or out You can use zoom in or out on the camera screen while taking a photo or recording a video. • On the camera screen, pinch or spread two fingers to zoom in or out, then use the displayed +/- slide bar.
Selfie shot You can use the front camera to view your face on the screen and take selfies. Gesture shot You can take selfies by using gestures. Show your palm to the front camera and then clench your fist. You can also clench your fist and then open it towards the front camera. • In three seconds, a photo is taken. • To use this feature, switch to the front camera mode, then tap Selfie shot Gesture shot. • Make sure that your palm and fist are within the reference line so that the camera can detect them.
Auto shot You can use the face detection feature to take selfies easily and conveniently. You can set the device so that, when you look at the screen, the front camera detects your face and takes a selfie automatically. • The white coloured guide frame appears when the front camera detects your face. If the subject within the guide frame stops moving, the guide frame colour turns blue, then the camera takes a photo. • Tap Selfie shot Auto shot to enable the Auto shot feature.
Gesture view After taking a selfie with the front camera, you can preview the selfie immediately by placing the screen close to your face. • Tap Gesture view to enable the Gesture view feature. • Only one preview is available each time a photo is taken. • If you rotate the device while in preview screen, the screen switches to camera mode. Save as flipped Before taking a photo with the front camera, tap The image is flipped horizontally. Save as flipped.
Gallery Gallery overview You can view and manage photos and videos saved on your device. 1 Press . • Saved photos and videos are displayed by folder. 2 Tap a folder and select a file. • View the selected file in full-screen mode. • While viewing a photo, swipe left or right to view the previous or next photo. • While viewing a video, swipe left or right to rewind or fast-forward the video. • Some file formats may not be supported, depending on the installed software.
Editing photos 1 While viewing a photo, tap . 2 Use a variety of effects and tools to edit the photo. 3 Tap SAVE to save changes. • The changes are overwritten to the original file. Save copy. • To save the edited photo as another file, tap Playing a video Edit the video. Add to or remove from your favourites. Access additional options. Open with QSlide. Adjust the sound volume. Lock or unlock the screen. Rewind the video. Fast-forward the video. Pause or play the video.
Deleting files You can delete files by using one of the following options: • Touch and hold a file from the file list, then tap Delete. • Tap from the file list and delete the desired files. • Deleted files are automatically moved to Trash and they can be restored to the Gallery within 7 days. Trash. Tap to completely delete the files. In • On the Gallery, tap this case, the files cannot be restored.
Music You can play and manage songs or music albums. LG Music. 1 Press 2 Select a category. 3 Select a music file. Switch to the playlist. Back to the previous screen. Search for music files. Access additional options. Add or delete favourites. Play in random order. Adjust the sound volume. Tap to play from the beginning of the current file / Double-tap to play the previous file / Touch and hold to rewind. Select a repeat mode. Set sound effects.
E-mail Email overview You can register an email account to your device and then you can check and send emails from your device. • If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. Registering email accounts When you use the email app for the first time, register your email account. E-mail. 1 Press Select an email service provider.
Checking email 1 Tap and select a mail box. 2 Select an email from the email list. • The email message appears. Sending email 1 Tap . 2 Enter the recipient’s email address. 3 Enter a subject and message. . • To attach files, tap • To access optional menu items, tap . 4 Tap to send the email. Calendar Calendar overview You can use the calendar to manage events and tasks. Adding events Calendar. 1 Press 2 Select a date and then tap . 3 Enter event details and tap SAVE.
Syncing events Tap Calendars to sync, and select a calendar to sync. • When your events are saved from the device to your Google account, they are automatically synced with the Google calendar, too. Then, you can sync other devices with the Google calendar in order to make those devices have the same events that your device has and to manage your events on those devices. Event pocket You can use the event pocket to create events.
Clock Alarm You can set an alarm to trigger it at a specified time. Clock Alarm. 1 Press Tap to add a new alarm. 2 3 Configure the alarm settings and tap SAVE. • If you select a previously set alarm, you can edit the alarm. • To delete an alarm, tap at the top of the screen. You can also touch and hold the alarm. World clock You can view the current time in cities around the world. Clock World clock. 1 Press 2 Tap and add a city.
Stopwatch You can use the stopwatch to record a lap time. Clock Stopwatch. 1 Press 2 Tap Start to initiate the stopwatch. • To record a lap time, tap Lap. 3 Tap Pause to pause the stopwatch. • To resume the stopwatch, tap Resume. • To clear all the records and restart the stopwatch, tap Reset. Downloads You can view, delete or share files downloaded via the Internet or apps. Tools Downloads. Press File Manager You can view and manage files saved on your device or cloud. Tools File Manager.
Voice Recorder You can record and save your voice or others’ voices from important events. Recorded voice files can be played back or shared. 1 Press 2 Tap . Tools Voice Recorder. • To pause recording, tap . • To save the location details of recording, tap Location. • To sync and save the event duration details which you added in Calendar, tap Event. 3 Tap to end recording. • The file is saved automatically and the pre-listen screen appears. 4 Tap to play the recorded voice.
Getting started with LG Health You can configure LG Health when launching the app for the first time or after resetting it. LG LG Health. 1 Press 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete configuration. Using LG Health You can view main information on LG Health and manage the amount of physical exercise and health information. LG LG Health. 1 Press 2 The following options are available. • • : View your exercise log on the day you want to check. : Begin tracking an exercise.
• Health-related information provided by LG Health is designed for user convenience and cannot be used for purposes of disease prevention, treatment, diagnosis or other medical issues. • LG Health may vary or may not be available, depending on the country and service provider. LG Health functions that are available and apps that can be added to LG Health may vary, depending on the country. This is due to differing laws and regulations. Contacts Contacts overview You can save and manage contacts.
Adding contacts to the speed dial list 1 On the contact list screen, tap Speed dial. 2 Tap Add contact from a speed dial number. 3 Select a contact. Searching for contacts You can search for contacts by using one of the following options: • On the contact list screen, enter a contact name in the search box. • Scroll the contact list up or down. • From the index of the contact list screen, tap the initial letter of a contact. Contacts list Editing contacts 1 On the contact list screen, select a contact.
Creating groups New group. 1 On the contact list screen, tap Groups 2 Enter a new group name. 3 Tap Add members, select contacts, then tap ADD. 4 Tap SAVE to save the new group. Tasks You can register tasks to your device to easily manage schedules. LG Tasks. 1 Press 2 Tap to add a task. 3 Enter task details and then tap SAVE. LG Backup You can back up, restore and move the data saved on your device. 1 Press Management LG Backup. You can also press Settings General Backup & reset LG Backup.
• Data in a Google account will not be backed up. When you synchronise your Google account, Google apps, Google contacts, Google calendar, Google memo app data and apps downloaded from Play store are stored on the Drive app automatically. • Backup files are saved with the file extension *.lbf under the LG Backup folder on the memory card or internal storage. • Fully charge the battery before backing up or restoring data to avoid unintentional powering off during the process.
Google apps You can use Google apps by setting a Google account. The Google account registration window appears automatically when you use a Google app for the first time. If you do not have a Google account, create one from your device. For details on how to use an app, see the Help in the app. • Some apps may not work depending on the area or service provider. Docs Create documents or edit documents created online or from another device. Share and edit documents together with others.
Play Movies & TV Use your Google account to rent or purchase movies. Purchase content and play it anywhere. Play Music Purchase music files from the Play Store. Play music files saved on your device. Sheets Create spreadsheets or edit spreadsheets created online or from another device. Share and edit spreadsheets together with others. Slides Create presentation material or edit presentation material created online or from another device. Share and edit presentation material together with others.
04 Settings
Settings You can customise the device settings in accordance with your preferences. Settings. Press • Tap and enter a keyword in the search box to access a setting item. • Tap to change the view mode. This user guide assumes that you are using the Tab view. Networks Dual SIM card You can configure Dual SIM card settings. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Dual SIM card. 2 Customise the following functions: • SIM card 1: Change the name and icon of the SIM card 1.
Wi-Fi You can connect to nearby devices over a Wi-Fi network. Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Tap Wi-Fi. • Available Wi-Fi networks appear automatically. 3 Select a network. • You may need to enter the network's Wi-Fi password. • The device skips this process for previously accessed Wi-Fi networks. If you do not want to automatically connect to a certain Wi-Fi network, touch and hold the network and then tap Forget network.
Wi-Fi Direct You can connect your device to other devices that support Wi-Fi Direct to share data directly with them. You do not need an access point. You can connect with more than two devices by using Wi-Fi Direct. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi Advanced Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Direct. • Nearby devices that support Wi-Fi Direct automatically appear. 2 Select a device. • Connection occurs when the device accepts the connection request. • The battery may drain faster when using Wi-Fi Direct.
Bluetooth You can connect your device to nearby devices that support Bluetooth to exchange data with them. Connect your device to a Bluetooth headset and a keyboard. This makes it easier to control the device. Pairing with another device 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Tap Bluetooth. • Available devices appear automatically. • To refresh the device list, tap SEARCH. • Only devices set as visible are displayed on the list. 3 Select a device from the list.
Mobile data You can turn on or off mobile data. You can also manage mobile data usage. Turning on mobile data 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Tap Mobile data. Customising mobile data settings 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Mobile data. 2 Customise the following settings: • Mobile data: Set to use data connections on mobile networks. • Limit mobile data usage: Set a limit for mobile data usage to block mobile data if the limit is reached.
Share & connect NFC You can use the device as a transportation card or credit card. You can also share data with the other device. 1 On the setting screen, tap Networks Share & connect NFC. to activate it. 2 Tap • Touch your device with other device that supports NFC to allow sharing data. • NFC antenna may be located differently depending on the device type. See Parts overview for details about the NFC antenna area. Android Beam You can share files by touching the back of the device to other device.
File sharing You can send and receive files between your device and other LG devices or tablets. • See Sending or receiving files for details. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect File sharing. 2 Customise the following settings: • LG X venture: Change the device name. • Save to: Set the destination folder to save files sent from other devices in. • File sharing: Permit receipt of files sent from other devices. • SmartShare Beam: Share files with other devices via SmartShare Beam.
LG AirDrive You can use your LG account to manage files saved on the device from a computer. You do not need a USB connection. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect LG AirDrive. 2 Use a single LG account to sign in to LG Bridge on the computer and LG AirDrive on the device. • LG Bridge software can be downloaded from www.lg.com. 3 Manage files on the device from the computer. Printing You can connect your device to a Bluetooth printer and print photos or documents saved on the device.
Tethering USB tethering You can connect the device to another device via USB and share mobile data. 1 Connect your device and other devices via USB cable. 2 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering USB tethering and then drag to activate it. • This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. • When connecting to a computer, download the USB driver from www.lg.com and install it on the computer.
Wi-Fi hotspot You can set the device as a wireless router so that other devices can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Wi-Fi hotspot and then drag to activate it. 2 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot, and enter the Wi-Fi name (SSID) and password. 3 Turn on Wi-Fi on the other device, and select the name of the device network on the Wi-Fi list. 4 Enter the network password.
Bluetooth tethering A Bluetooth-connected device can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Bluetooth tethering and then drag to activate it. 2 Turn on Bluetooth on both devices, and pair them. • This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. • More information is available at this web site: http://www.android.
More Airplane mode You can turn off the call and mobile data functions. When this mode is on, functions that do not involve data, such as games and music playback, remain available. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Airplane mode. 2 Tap TURN ON in the confirmation screen. Mobile networks You can customise mobile data settings. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Mobile networks. 2 Customise the following settings: • Network mode: Select a network type.
2 Tap Add VPN. • This feature is available only when the screen lock is activated. If the screen lock is deactivated, a notification screen appears. Tap SETTINGS from the notification screen to activate the screen lock. See Setting a screen lock for details. 3 Enter VPN details and tap SAVE. Configuring VPN settings 1 Tap a VPN from the VPNS list. 2 Enter the VPN user account details and tap CONNECT. • To save the account details, select the Save account information checkbox.
• Do not disturb: Set the time, range and app type to receive notification messages. Receive notification messages only on particular days of the week. • Lock screen: Display or hide a notification message on the lock screen. You can also hide private information. • Apps: Select the apps that can show their notification messages on the screen, and set the priorities of those apps in regard to notification messages. • Notification LED: Indicate device status via LED.
• Brightness: Use the slide bar to change the device's screen brightness. To automatically adjust screen brightness according to ambient light intensity, tap the Auto switch. • Auto: Set the device so that the screen brightness is automatically adjusted in accordance with the ambient light intensity. • Comfort view: Set the device to reduce amount of blue light on screen to reduce eye strain. • Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotate the screen according to the device's orientation.
General Language & keyboard You can customise language and keyboard settings for your device. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Language & keyboard. 2 Customise the following settings: • Language: Select a language to apply for the device. • Current keyboard: View the keyboard currently in use. Select a keyboard to use when entering text. • LG Keyboard: Customise the LG keyboard settings. • Google voice typing: Configure the options for text dictation by Google.
Accounts & sync You can add or manage accounts, including a Google account. You can also sync particular apps or user information automatically. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Accounts & sync. 2 Customise the following settings: • Auto-sync data: Sync all the registered accounts automatically. • ACCOUNTS: View a list of registered accounts. To view or change details of an account, tap the account. • ADD ACCOUNT: Add accounts.
• Vision Grayscale: Switch the screen to grayscale mode. • Vision End call with the Power key: End a call by pressing the Power/Lock key. • Vision Answer call with the Home key: Answer a call by pressing the home key. • Hearing Captions: Turn on the subtitle service when playing videos for the hearing impaired. • Hearing Notification LED: Indicate device status via LED. • Hearing Flash alerts: Set the device to notify you with a blinking light for incoming calls, messages and alarms.
• Accessibility features shortcut: Quickly access a frequently used three times. function by press • Auto-rotate screen: Automatically change the screen orientation according to the physical position of the device. • Switch Access: Create key combinations to control your device. QuickButton You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off. On the settings screen, tap General QuickButton. • See QuickButton for details.
Fingerprints & security 1 On the settings screen, tap General Fingerprints & security. 2 Customise the following settings: • Fingerprints: Use your fingerprint to unlock the screen or content. See Fingerprint recognition overview for details. • Content lock: Set the method to lock files in the Gallery or QuickMemo+. • Encrypt SD card: Encrypt the memory card to prevent use on another device. See Memory card encryption for details. • Secure start-up: Protect your device with a lock when it powers on.
Date & time You can customise date and time settings for your device. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Date & time. 2 Customise the settings. Storage You can view and manage internal storage on the device or storage space of the memory card. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Storage. 2 Customise the following settings: • DEVICE STORAGE: View the total storage space and free space in the device’s internal storage. View a list of apps in use and the storage capacity for each app.
Memory You can view the average amount of memory usage over a certain period of time and the memory occupied by an app. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Memory. 2 Tap to set a time slot to retrieve data. Apps You can view a list of installed apps. Stop apps from running or delete apps, if necessary. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Apps. 2 Select an app and perform actions. Tap & pay You can make payments with your device instead of a credit card. On the settings screen, tap General Tap & pay.
• Network settings reset: Reset Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and other network settings. • Factory data reset: Reset all settings for the device and delete data. • Resetting your device deletes all data on it. Enter your device name, Google account and other initial information again. About phone You can view information about your device, such as the name, status, software details and legal information. On the settings screen, tap General About phone and view information.
05 Appendix
LG Language Settings Select a language to use on your device. Settings General Language & keyboard • Press Language ADD LANGUAGE, and select a language. - Touch and hold and drag it to the top of the language list to set it as a default language. LG Bridge LG Bridge overview LG Bridge is an app that helps you manage the photos, music, videos and documents saved on your LG smartphone from your computer conveniently. You can back up contacts, photos and more to the computer or update the device software.
Installing LG Bridge on a computer 1 2 3 4 Go to www.lge.com from your computer. Select your region. Click Support Software & Firmware. Enter the name of your device. OR Select by the Product Category. 5 Go to PC Sync LG Bridge to download the setup file. • Go to Details to view the minimum requirements for installing LG Bridge. Phone software update LG Mobile phone software update from the Internet For more information about using this function, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/index.
LG Mobile Phone software update via Overthe-Air (OTA) This feature allows you to conveniently update your phone’s software to a newer version via OTA, without connecting a USB cable. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device. Settings To perform the phone software update, press General About phone Common Update center Software Update Check now for update.
FAQ This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures SIM card error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection/ Dropped network Move toward a window or Signal is weak or you are into an open area. Check the outside the carrier network.
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Make sure device is charging at a normal temperature. Contact problem Check the charger and its connection to the device. No voltage Plug the charger into a different outlet. Charger defective Replace the charger. Wrong charger Use only original LG accessories. Number not allowed. The Fixed dialling number function is on.
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Restarting the device If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or turn off the device and turn it on again. Performing a soft reset A soft reset may be used to reset the device if the screen freezes, or the buttons, touch screen, or device are no longer responding. To perform a soft reset of your device, simply press & hold the Volume Down and Power keys until the device restart.
Anti-Theft Guide Set up your device to prevent other people from using it if it's been reset to factory settings without your permission. For example, if your device is lost, stolen, or wiped, only someone with your Google account or screen lock information can use the device. All you need to make sure your device is protected is: • Set a screen lock: If your device is lost or stolen but you have a screen lock set, the device can't be erased using the Settings menu unless your screen is unlocked.
More information Open Source Software Notice Information To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, LG Electronics declares that this LG-M710ds product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.lg.
Disposal of your old appliance 1. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. 2. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. 3.